Register your product and get support at www.philips.
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ - 1ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ - 1.1 - 1.2 - 1.3 - 1.4 - 1.5 - 1.6 - 1.7 - 1.8 - 1.9 ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Android 4 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 4 ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ 4 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ 4 ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ 4 ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ 4 Skype 5 ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 5 ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ - 7.1 - 7.2 - 7.3 - 7.4 - 7.5 - 8.1 - 8.2 - 8.3 - 8.
- 15.4ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ - 15.5ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 50 - 15.6ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﺔ - 16ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ - 16.1 - 16.2 - 16.3 - 16.4 - 16.5 - 17.1 - 17.2 - 17.3 - 17.4 - 17.5 50 50 - 26ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 52 53 ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ 53 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ 53 ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ 53 53 53 - 18ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ - 18.1 - 18.2 - 18.3 - 18.
1 * ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ 1.4 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ 1.1 ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Android ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ. ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Philipsﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .™Android ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺩّ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﺟﺎﻟﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺒﺔ .ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘَﻲ Twitterﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ Skype-to-Skypeﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ .Skype ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ Philips ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ. ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ .Skype 1.8 ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻫﻮﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ TP Vision Europe B.Vﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ . ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ 2.3 2 2.1 ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ.
2.5 ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻬﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ IEC Coax 75 ﺃﻭﻡ .RF ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ SAT 1ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ .
4ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .WPSWPS ﻭﻋُﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ 5ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ. 6ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.7 -ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ. 3 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 3.1 ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ PINﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻊ WPS ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ WPSﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ، PINﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ، WEP ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ (WoWLAN) Fi-Wi ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ .)WoWLAN (Wi-Fi ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ … WoWLAN 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ .)WoWLAN (Wi-Fi 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. 4ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﻢ. 5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ" .
4 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ 4.1 ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ .ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. EasyLink HDMI CEC ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ HDMIﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ، EasyLinkﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ EasyLink HDMI CECﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ.
ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ -ﺑﺼﺮﻱ Y Pb Pr ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ -ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ. Y Pb Pr -ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ .5.1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ HDMI ARCﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ) ،(HTSﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ -ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ .
3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.BACK 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ EasyLink ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ EasyLinkﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ، EasyLinkﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ EasyLink ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ EasyLink 4.3 ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ EasyLinkﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ) ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ( ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ. ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ PIN ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴّﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ، ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. 4.5 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ. ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ،ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ HDMIﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺃﻭ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ SCARTﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ HDMI ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ… ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ 180ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑًﺎ. ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ .
4.8 ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ DVD ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ HDMIﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ DVDﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺃﻭ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ، SCARTﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ HDMI ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ-ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﻳﻤﻴﻦ Scart / ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻛّﺐ ( (CVBSﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ) CVBS ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ/ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ) SCARTﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ USBﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ .ﻭﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ .USB 1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ USBﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ USBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ USBﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ. 2ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ USBﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 3ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ) ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ( .ﺳﺘؤﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻧﻘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ • ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ = OK • ﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ =ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ، USBﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USBﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ USBﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ . ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ Ultra HDﻋﻠﻰ USB ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ Ultra HDﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ .ﺳﻴﺼﻐّﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ " " Ultra HDﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ .ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ Ultra HDﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ .USB ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ SOURCESﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .
4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 4.16 ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﺬﻛّﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 4.17 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ. ﺳﻤّﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ HDMI ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ 3.5ﻣﻢ .
5 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 5.1 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ POWERﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 5.3 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺟﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺳﻴُﻀﻴء ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻌﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺗﻪ ،ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ...
5.5 ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ 4ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻠﻖّ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 10ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ، ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ.
6 ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ 6.1 ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ HOME - 1 ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. SOURCES 2 ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ. - 3ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ، ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ /ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ - 1 ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ. INFO - 4 ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ. - 2ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ • ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣؤﺷﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻂ) .ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ( ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ – OKﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ – ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ. ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ ،ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻚ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ OKﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻫﻮ .ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ 5ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .
ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 6ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ. 7ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ. ] ،WATCHﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻗُﻞ "ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ"[ - ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ. - 5 Spacebar - 6ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ OK - 7ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. * ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ Azerty /Qwertyﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،Cyrillic /Qwertyﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ OKﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. Cyrillicﻭ Qwerty ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .
ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ Azertyﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ …Azerty ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ -ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ -ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ )Philipsﺣﻮﺍﻟﻰ 10ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ(، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ . 6.8 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ. ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺰﺍﻝ ﻳﺪﻙ ،ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﻧﺸﻄًﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ. • ﻭﺳﻴؤﺩﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ 5ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻓﻌﺖ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ 5ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ" ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ. 7 ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ 7.1 ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ. ﺑﻔﻀﻞﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .
7.5 ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ • ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻴﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ،ﻏﻴّﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ .ﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. • ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺧﻔﺾ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ. ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
8 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 8.1 ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 9ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ 10ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. 11ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ،12 -ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ. ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ،Androidﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ،Androidﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .
ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ .ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺟﺪﺗﻬﺎ.
• ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ. • ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ. • ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ. 9 ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .BACK 9.1 ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺬﺭﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ.
EXITﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 10 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 10.4 ™Chrome 10.1 ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ Chrome ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ، ﺗﻘﺪّﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .
ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ… 10.7 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ HOME ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ OPTIONSﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ. 4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﻤﺮ 18ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ. 5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ . Google ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ … Android 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.Android . 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 10.10 ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ -ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ،ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﺩﻋﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
11 ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ. ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺜﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. 11.1 ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ .
12 TV on Demand 12.1 ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔً ﻟﻚ. ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ،ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .
ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ 13 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ 13.1 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻛﺒﻞ ) (DVB-Cﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ 1001ﺻﻌﻮﺩًﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ .ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ،ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. LISTﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ 1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ *. 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ.
ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ. ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ) ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ) ،(CAMﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺺ /ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔً ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ/ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،TEXTﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ. TEXT ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ… ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
4 -ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﺼًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﺼًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ .ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .SUBTITLE ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.BACK ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ… ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ. 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻭﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ،ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .OK ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﻭﻳﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻً ﺑﻜﺒﻞ HDMIﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ HDMI CECﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. 14 ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ 14.1 ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻪ. ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ… 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰSOURCESﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ .ﺳﻴُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ، BACKﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺿﻮﺀ LEDﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ. 15 ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 15.1 ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﺃﺑﻌِﺪ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 15.
ﺧﻄﺮ • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻤﻚ .ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ. • ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻧﻘﺪﻳة/ﺯﺭ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺕ. • ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ،ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ.
ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ… • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ،ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.2 -ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. 15.3 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 15.4 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘّﻊ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ،ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﻌﻮﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭٍ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻻ ﻧﺤﺒّﺬ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ. • ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻤﻞ ،ﺇﻟﺦ .(.ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺯﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ.
16.4 16 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ. 16.1 ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ… 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.MULTI VIEW 2 -ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻬﺎﻡﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣؤﺧﺮًﺍ -ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ، Chromeﺇﻟﺦ -ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ .
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ،ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ. 17 ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 17.1 ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻤﺘﻴﻦ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ .ﻭﻳﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻻﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ،ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ. ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻻﻋﺒَﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ Philips PTA507 -ﺃﻭ PTA508ﺃﻭ PTA509ﺃﻭ PTA517ﺃﻭ PTA518ﺃﻭ .PTA519 ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ .
18.3 18 ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ Miracast Fi-Wi ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ™. Wi-Fi Miracast 18.1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ USB ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi Certified . ™Miracastﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Miracastﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ™، ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ .
* ﺇﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ Miracastﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ WiDi 3.5ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ. 18.4 ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )Wi-Fiﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ " ") tvname _DIRECT ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ .ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻻ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓWi-Fi Miracastﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ + ﺃﻭ .- • ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ LISTﺃﻭ ) ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(. ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﺍﻟﺦ ,(.ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .INFO ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ… ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ 1ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. 2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪًﺍ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻏﺎﻥٍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .
2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ. 19 Pause TV 19.1 ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ… • ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ • ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ • ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ. 3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . OK ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. 20 ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ 20.1 ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ.
20.3 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ… 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰHOME ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ. 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ OKﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ) ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ( ﺃﻭ) ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ) ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ) ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ .ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﻪ.
21 ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ Skype ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ Skypeﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ Skypeﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ Skypeﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Skype ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. 21.1 ﺣﻮﻝ Skype ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ …Skype 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .Skype 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Skypeﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. 4ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ Skypeﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦﻗﺒﻞ ،ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ .
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Skype ﻓﻲﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ،ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Skypeﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ Skypeﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ،ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ Skypeﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﻢ Skypeﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ. 21.4 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Skype ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ،ﻳﻔﺘﺢ Skype ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .
ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ Skypeﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ .ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ .Skypeﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ… ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ .ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ. 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝﺑﻬﺎ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ .
ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ Skype ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ – ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ Skypeﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ، Skypeﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰSkype ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ Skypeﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ Skypeﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،Skypeﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .
21.9 ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ Skypeﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ… 1ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ Skypeﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ. 2ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، Skypeﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.< ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﻋﺔ. 3 -ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ 21.10 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ.
22 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ. ﻧﻈﺎﻡ Room Multi ﺩﻓﻖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ 22.1 ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ، Multi roomﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ،ﺳﻴﻌﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ .ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ* ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .
23 ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ… ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺭﻣﺰﻩ ﻣﻦ . Smart TVﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ Facebookﺃﻭ Twitterﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ .Smart TV ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
24 ﻣﻦ TV Remote App Philips ﺇﻥ TV Remote Appﻣﻦ Philipsﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ،ﺑﻔﻀﻞ TV Remote App ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ .ﺃﺭﺳِﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ TV Remote Appﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ .
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ .ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 25 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ 25.1 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ .ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ <ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔWP .ﻫﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ BLﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. BACK 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ… 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ،Super Resolutionﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ. .Natural Motion 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LCDﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ. ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ… ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ… 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ. ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ… ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 1ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ،ﺇﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ… ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ. • ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ • Natural • ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ • ﺯﺍﻫﻲ • ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ، HDMI CECﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .EasyLink • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ،EasyLinkﻓﺴﻴُﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ .
ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .hue +Ambilight ﻭﺟﻮﺩ Hue Bridgeﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 3 -ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ . OK ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ Philips Hue bridgeﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ .Hue ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ Hue ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ Philips Hueﻛﺒﺼﻴﻼﺕ ،hue +Ambilightﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ… ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺼﻴﻼﺕ Philips Hueﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ .
< .Lounge Light 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ Ambilight< ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ. 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ hue +Ambilightﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﺑﻔﻀﻞ TV Remote Appﻣﻦ Philipsﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Lounge Light ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ .
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻞ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ؟ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ،PINﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟـﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻋﻠﻰ .OK 3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻟﻪ.8888 4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ PINﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻩ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻼﻡ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺸﻄًﺎ. ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. 25.7 ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ.
< ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ 2ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .OK OK . 3ﺣﺪﺩﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ. ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. < ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ 25.
3ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪّﻣﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺋﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ .ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ،ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ.
ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ .ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻣُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ. ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩﻳﺪﻭﻱ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ،ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ. ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ .ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ.
-2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ. < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ/ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ -3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ Unicableﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ Unicableﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔًﺎ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ .ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﺣﺪﺩﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .
ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ. ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﺚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻔﺮ( ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻠﺪًﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨًﺎ .
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ… ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ LNB 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 3ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕﺑﺤﺚ .ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ،ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ .ﻭﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. 5 -ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ.
• ﻗﺪ ﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
ﻓﻴﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 26 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ… 1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.< ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ 2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 26.1 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 26.2 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ USB ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .
this software for any purposewith or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyrightnotice and this permission notice appear in all copies.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
Voisine. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the MIT license, which can be found below. publicity relating to this software or products derived fromit. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group'ssoftware".We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis ofcommercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims areassumed by the product vendor. Protobuf (2.
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
gain unless it is incidental;(ii) reproduction and distribution of the Software and Document in complete and unmodified form; and(iii) when you distribute the Software and Document, you agree to attach the Terms of Use and a statement that the latest version of the Terms of Use is available from the "Office of the Government Chief Information Officer" Web site (http://w ww.ogcio.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/t erms.htm). bound by the most updated version of the Terms of Use.3.
Audio Codec SRC (1.8.1) This TV uses Audio Codec SRC which is used by libamphal.so.The original download site for this software is : https://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/resample/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2, which can be found below.
D-Bus is a simple system for interprocess communication and coordination.The original download site for this software is : http://dbus.freedesktop.orgThis piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL V2. fusion (8.10.3) Fusion provides an implementation of abstractions needed for multi-threaded/multi-process programming: .The original download site for this software is : http://www.directfb.
IPRoute2 (NA) IPRoute2 is used for TCP/IP,Networking and Traffic control.The original download site for this software is : htt p://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/netw orking/iproute2This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL V2. substantial portions of the Software.
Technology.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
daemonThe original download site for this software is : http://hostap.epitest.fi/wpa_supplicant/This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of GPL version 2.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights.
are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1.
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions.
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] 8. Limitation of Liability.
or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
0. Definitions -------------- ============ Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
the terms of this license. forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: 4. Contacts ----------There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
* ========================================== ========================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */ in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3.
.ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ2 .ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ3 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ4 ﻹﻏﻼﻕ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭBACK .ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.
27 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ 27.1 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻟﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ EC /2002/96ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻫﺪﻑﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ .ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ، ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .
27.3 p • 1080 ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Android • 60 - p 480 × 640ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 600 × 800ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 768 × 1024ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 768 × 1280ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 765 × 1360ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 768 × 1360ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 1024 × 1280ﻫﺮﺗﺰ • 60 - p 1080 × 1920ﻫﺮﺗﺰ Jelly Bean 4.2.2 27.
(v2 ) WMA ، ) III /II /Layer I /2/2.5ﺗﺸﻤﻞ MP3 v10 ) ﺇﻟﻰ /v9 (WMA Pro ،( v9.
28 ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ Philips 28.1 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ ،Philipsﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ,ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
BACKﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ 28.3 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ -ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ.
ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ.
29 ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ: • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ. • ﺃﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 29.
29.2 ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻴء. • ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ. • ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً .ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﺿﻮﺍﺀ Ambilight LEDﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ .ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. • ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺑﻬﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ. • ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ .
ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﺠﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Philipsﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ،ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ) ( EMFﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ .ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ Philipsﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ .
™ DTS Premium Sound Windows Media ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ Windows Mediaﺇﻣّﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Microsoftﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘّﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. DTS Premium Sound ™ Microsoft PlayReady ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ، DTSﺭﺍﺟﻊ . patents.dts.com ://http ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ DTS Licensing Limited ,DTS .ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ،ﻭ DTSﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ، ﻭﻗﻨﺎﺓ DTS 2.0ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ DTS © . Inc ,DTS .Inc ،ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ.
ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ.
ﻓﻬﺮﺱ A 75 Ambilight+hue 77 Ambilight، Lounge Light 77 Ambilight، Lounge Light+hue ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ 75 Ambilight، ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ 77 Ambilight، ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ 6 Ambilight، ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ 77 Ambilight، ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 75 Ambilight، ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ 113 Android OS، C ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ 13 CAM، ™35 Chrome 13 CI+ D ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ 9 DMR، )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( 82 DVB ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ 11 DVI، E 12 EasyLink 11 EasyLink HDMI CEC ﺗﻮ
55ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ USB ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ 55 ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ،ﻣﺴﺢ 36 ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 43 ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ 112 ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ 53 ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ 72 ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ 72 ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 23 ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ 22 ﻣؤﺷﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 25 ﻣؤﺷﺮ ،ﺣﻮﻝ 25 ﻣؤﺷﺮ ،ﺳﺮﻋﺔ 25 19ﻣﺎﻭﺱ USB ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ،ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ 19 ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 38 18ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،USBﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ 18ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،USBﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ 19ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ،USBﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ 43 ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ 43 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 55 ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ 70 ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ،ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ 71 ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ 34 ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 34 ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ 84 ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ،ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ 53 ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ 43 ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ 79 ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ 116 ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ 32 ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ 111 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ 69 116ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ Philips ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 43 ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ 32 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ 87 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ 87 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ 34 13ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﺝ 27ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪAzerty ، 27ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪQwerty ، 26ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ Qwerty ،ﻭAzerty 27ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ Qwerty ،ﻭCyrillic ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 27 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻣؤﺷﺮ 25 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 24 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ 27 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ 28 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ 26 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ 27 ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ 15 ﺟ
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org) Contact information Argentina 0800 444 7749 Buenos Aires 0810 444 7782 België / Belgique 070 700 035 (0,15€/min.) Bosna i Hercegovina 033 941 251 (Lokalni poziv) Brazil 0800 701 0245 Sao Paulo 2938 0245 Бълария 02 4916 273 (Национален номер) Česká republika 228880895 (Místní tarif) Danmark 3525 8314 Deutchland 0180 501 04 69 (0,14€/Min.) Ελλάδα 2111983028 (Εθνική κλήση) España 902 88 10 83 (0,10€ + 0,08€/min.